Samsung | PS50A410C1 | Samsung PS42A410C1 User guide

‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪SAMSUNG WORLD-WIDE‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.SAMSUNG‬‬
‫‪Country‬‬
‫‪SOUTH AFRICA‬‬
‫‪U.A.E‬‬
‫‪Customer Care Centre‬‬
‫)‪7864-0860-SAMSUNG (726‬‬
‫)‪7864-800-SAMSUNG (726‬‬
‫‪4726-8000‬‬
‫‪Web Site‬‬
‫‪www.samsung.com‬‬
‫‪www.samsung.com‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻼزﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺋﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.gnusmaS‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/global/register‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬
‫‪BN68-01448C-00‬‬
‫‪2008-3-27 12:39:36‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 1‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻣﺜﻠﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ (PDP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ “ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ”‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ PDP‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪PDP‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻨﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﻳَﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺕ “ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ”‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺕ “ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ” ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺪﺩ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﻳًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ PDP‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) ١٫٢٣٠٫٠٠٠‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ (SD‬ﻭ ‪) ٣٫١٥٠٫٠٠٠‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ (HD‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ٤١‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ PDP‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ٣:٤‬ﺑﻘﺎء ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﻒ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ “ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ” ﻭ”ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ” ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫© ‪.Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved 2008‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:19‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪٢ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ‪٤ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ‪٤ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪٥ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪٦ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪٨ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٢٩ .......................... (Windows XP‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ‪٣٠ .............................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪٣١ .............................................(PC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ‪٩ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪٩ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪١٠ .........................(Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪١١ ...........................................TOOLS‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪١٢ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪١٣ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪) (Teletext‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ( ‪٣٢ .........‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ) ‪٣٤ ............... ( VESA‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ( ‪٣٥ ..................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ )ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ( ‪٣٦ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪٣٧ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪٣٨ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪١٣ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪١٤ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ /‬ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪١٥ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪١٦ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪١٦ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪١٧ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٧ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪١٨ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪١٨ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٢٠ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪٢٣ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٢٣ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ(‪٢٥ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ( ‪٢٥ ..........................‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٢٦ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ )‪ / (Language‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )‪(Light Effect‬‬
‫‪/‬ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ)‪ /(Entertainment‬ﻟﺤﻦ )‪ / (Melody‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)‪٢٧ .......................................... / (Energy Saving‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪٢٨ .............................. (PIP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:19‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪AAA‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬
‫)ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ(‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺳﻔﻠﻲ ‪ /‬ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ )‪(2ea‬‬
‫‪) ,‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫)ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ(‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪S-Video‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI/DVI‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ )ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺃﺣﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺼﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ .PDP‬ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪PDP‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ PDP‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ PDP‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪20‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠° ~ -٢٠°‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٤ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:19‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 4‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOURCE‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻀﻢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ )‪ TV‬ﻭ ‪ AV1‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ AV2‬ﻭ ‪ S-Video‬ﻭ ‪ Component1‬ﻭ ‪Component2‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ PC‬ﻭ ‪ HDMI1‬ﻭ ‪.(HDMI2‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﻃﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪− VOL +‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪− VOL +‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄ ﻭ ► ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﻀﻲء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺲ ﺗﺸﻌﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲ ﻭ‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫▼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٥ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:23‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 5‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫‪or‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ S-VIDEO) AV IN‬ﺃﻭ ‪(AUDIO R/L / VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ S-Video‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (Video‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ‪) VCR‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٦ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:24‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ,‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑـ ‪HDMI‬؟‬
‫ ﻫﻲ “ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ” ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻧﻘﻞ‬‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻊ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ‪ DVI‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ‪) HDCP‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVI IN (HDMI٢) AUDIO R/L‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪) DVI‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ANT IN‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ ٧٥Ω‬ﺫﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪SERVICE‬‬
‫ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ RCA‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ‪COMPONENT IN 2 ، COMPONENT IN 1‬‬
‫ ﻣﺪﺧﻼ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ (AUDIO R/L‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(PR/PB/Y‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪PC IN(PC) / AUDIO‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪(AUDIO R/L / VIDEO) AV IN 1‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ RCA‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫‪) VCR‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN 1،2‬‬
‫ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ “ﺻﻮﺕ” ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫‪ HDMI‬ﺑـ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ،HDMI/DVI‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI IN 2‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟـ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﻭ ‪Component‬‬
‫‪480i‬‬
‫‪480p‬‬
‫‪576i‬‬
‫‪576p‬‬
‫‪720p‬‬
‫‪1080i‬‬
‫‪HDMI/DVI 50Hz‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪HDMI/DVI 60Hz‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪Component‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٧ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:28‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 7‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪POWER‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺃﻭﺭﻗﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫‪(١٧‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‪/‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪(LIST/FLOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪: P‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪: P‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٨ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:39‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 8‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪.AAA‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺘﻴﻦ “‪ ”+‬ﻭ “–” ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ,‬ﺃﻱ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺠﻨﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ! ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ؟‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ؟‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻫﻞ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ؟‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ؟‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻓﺘﺔ ﻧﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ؟‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪) (Power‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ “ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴَﺎ” ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٣‬ﺃﻭ “ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ” ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ “ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪) Plug & Play‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(” ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٠‬ﻭ ‪.١١‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪) (Power‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪POWER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪) (Power‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (Picture‬ﻭﺻﻮﺕ )‪ (Sound‬ﻭﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫)‪ (Channel‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (Setup‬ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ )‪.(Input‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲‪ ►/◄/▼/‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ RETURN‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50 G‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٩ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:40‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 9‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪(Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺘﻼﺣﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ .(Start Plug & Play‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .ENTER‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻐﺔ )‪.(Language‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ” ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)‪.(Select ‘Home Use’ when installing this TV in your home.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ )‪ (Store Demo‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫)‪ (,Home use‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ )‪. (Home use‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ إﻋﺪاد ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‬
‫)‪ (Store Demo‬ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺪ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫)‪) (Home use‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .Volume‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Menu‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .ENTER‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ )‪.(Area‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ .ENTER‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪.(Auto Store‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (Clock Set‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪.(Stop‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻬﺮ )‪ (Month‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )‪ (Day‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻨﺔ‬
‫)‪ (Year‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (Hour‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )‪ (Minute‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .am/pm‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ )‪ (Month‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )‪ (Day‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ )‪ (Year‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ (Hour‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ )‪ (Minute‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪.(Enjoy your viewing) .‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،ENTER‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪Français‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ” ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻣﻨﻮﻟﺚ‪/‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪/‬ﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫▼‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪P 1‬‬
‫‪40MHz‬‬
‫‪0 %‬‬
‫‪C -‬‬‫ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫ﺷﻬﺮ‬
‫‪--‬‬
‫‪----‬‬
‫‪: --‬‬
‫‪--‬‬
‫‪am‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪--‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪am/pm‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٠ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:42‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 10‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪...‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪W‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻦ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژﯼ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪PIP‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ ،(Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)‪.(Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪.(Start Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪TOOLS‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ “ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ” ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ “ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ” )‪.(TOOLS‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲‪ ▼/‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲‪ ENTER/►/◄/▼/‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Dual I-II‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ،SRS TS XT‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ،I-II‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١١ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:44‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 11‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪) VCR‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ )‪ ،(Input‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫)‪.(Source List‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ TV :‬ﻭ‪ AV1‬ﻭ‪ AV2‬ﻭ ‪ S-Video‬ﻭ ‪Component1‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ Component2‬ﻭ ‪ PC‬ﻭ ‪ HDMI1‬ﻭ ‪HDMI2‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪TV :‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪AV1‬‬
‫‪AV2‬‬
‫‪S-Video‬‬
‫‪Component1‬‬
‫‪Component2‬‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫‪HDMI1‬‬
‫‪HDMI2‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TV‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٢ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:44‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 12‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ )‪ ،(Input‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ )‪ ،(Edit Name‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ,DVD ,VCR:‬ﻛﺒﻞ‪ (Cable STB),‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ)‪, (Satellite STB‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪,(AV Receiver)AV‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ)‪,(Game‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ)‪TV,PC ,(Camcorder‬‬
‫‪DMA, HD DVD, Blu-Ray, IPTV,‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪TV :‬‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪−−−− −−−− :‬‬
‫‪VCR −−−− :‬‬
‫‪DVD −−−−:‬‬
‫‪ −−−− :‬ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪PVR STB‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪AV‬‬
‫‪ −−−− :‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫▼‬
‫‪AV1‬‬
‫‪AV2‬‬
‫‪S-Video‬‬
‫‪Component1‬‬
‫‪Component2‬‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫‪HDMI1‬‬
‫‪HDMI2‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ )‪ ،(Channel‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ )‪.(Area‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،(Auto Store‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ RETURN‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻣﻨﻮﻟﺚ‪/‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪/‬ﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪P 1‬‬
‫‪40MHz‬‬
‫‪C --‬‬
‫‪0 %‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٣ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:47‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 13‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪ ,‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ )‪ ،(Channel‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‪ ،(Manual Store‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪) (Programme‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫)‪ (٩ ~ ٠‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ)‪NTSC ٣٫٥٨/NTSC ٤٫٤٣/SECAM/PAL/Auto :(Colour System‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ)‪M / I / DK / BG :(Sound System‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ )‪) (Channel‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻚ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ(‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) C‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﺛﻴﺮ( ﺃﻭ ‪) S‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (٩ ~ ٠‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺻﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ )‪) (Search‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻚ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ )‪) (Store‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻬﺎ(‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ )‪ (OK‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪P 1:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪BG :‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪5:‬‬
‫‪MHz‬‬
‫‪175 :‬‬
‫‪?:‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪) P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ‪ P00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .P99‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪) C‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﺛﻴﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺑﺚ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪) S‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٤ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:48‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 14‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ /‬ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ )‪ (Channel Manager‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻠﻘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ )‪ ،(Channel‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ )‪ ،(Channel Manager‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ)‪ (Channel List‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ)‪.(Channel List‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ) ( ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲‪ ،►/◄/▼/‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) (‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ CH LIST‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﻟﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺒﻬﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ )‪ ،(Child Lock‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ (On‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ)‪ ،(Channel List‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ) ( ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲‪،►/◄/▼/‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻐﻠﻘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ )‪.(Child Lock‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪P 1 C4‬‬
‫‪1/10‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫▲‬
‫ ‪C-‬‬‫‪C2‬‬
‫‪C 83‬‬
‫‪C 80‬‬
‫‪C7‬‬
‫‪C 89‬‬
‫‪C 90‬‬
‫‪C 11‬‬
‫‪C 12‬‬
‫‪C 13‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫▼‬
‫ﻏﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٥ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:49‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 15‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ )‪ ،(Channel‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﺯ )‪ ،(Sort‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪----‬‬‫‪----‬‬‫‪----‬‬‫‪----‬‬‫‪W ----‬‬‫‪----‬‬‫‪----‬‬‫‪----‬‬‫‪----‬‬‫‪-----‬‬
‫‪C−−‬‬
‫‪C2‬‬
‫‪C83‬‬
‫‪C80‬‬
‫‪C7‬‬
‫‪C−−‬‬
‫‪C−−‬‬
‫‪C−−‬‬
‫‪C−−‬‬
‫‪C−−‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ )‪ ،(Channel‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ )‪ ،(Name‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ )ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ,/ ,* ,- ,+ ,A~Z, ٠~٩ :‬ﻓﺎﺭﻍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ►‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ ‪ ٥‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪----‬‬‫‪----‬‬‫‪----‬‬‫‪-----‬‬
‫‪C−−‬‬
‫‪C2‬‬
‫‪C83‬‬
‫‪C80‬‬
‫‪C7‬‬
‫‪C−−‬‬
‫‪C−−‬‬
‫‪C−−‬‬
‫‪C−−‬‬
‫‪C−−‬‬
‫‪----‬‬‫‪----‬‬‫‪----‬‬‫‪----‬‬‫‪-----‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٦ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:52‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .INFO‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫‪) OSD‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ “ *”‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪ (Reset‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ )‪ ،(Channel‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ )‪ ،(Fine Tune‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ‬
‫►ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪*P 1‬‬
‫‪+2‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫‪*P 1‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪: SRS TS XT‬‬
‫‪−− : −− am‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(Picture‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ )‪.(Mode‬‬
‫ﺣﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )‪ (Dynamic‬ﻭﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ)‪ (Standard‬ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫)‪(Movie‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )‪ (Dynamic‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮء ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ)‪ (Standard‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ )‪ (Movie‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ P.MODE‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Dual I-II‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫►‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫◄‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٧ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:54‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 17‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(Picture‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ )‪.(Mode‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )‪ (Dynamic‬ﻭﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ)‪ (Standard‬ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫)‪(Movie‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ )‪ – (Cell Light‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ )‪ – (Contrast‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ )‪ – (Brightness‬ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪ – (Sharpness‬ﻟﻮﻥ )‪(Colour‬‬
‫– ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ)‪(Tint‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ )‪ (Tint‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ TV‬ﻭ ‪ AV‬ﻭ ‪ S-Video‬ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.PAL‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪ ،(PC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻮء ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ)‪ (Cell Light‬ﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ)‪ (Contrast‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ)‪.(Brightness‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(Picture‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ)‪ ،(Detailed Settings‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ)‪ (Black Adjust‬ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )‪Dynamic‬‬
‫‪ (Contrast‬ﻭﺟﺎﻣﺎ)‪ (Gamma‬ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ)‪ (Colour Space‬ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ)‪ (White Balance‬ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ )‪ (Flesh Tone‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫)‪.(Edge Enhancement‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ )‪ (Movie‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪ ،(Standard‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ )‪.(Detailed Settings‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪ ،(PC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫)‪ (Dynamic Contrast‬ﻭ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ )‪ (Gamma‬ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪White‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (Balance‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪0 :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪0 :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٨ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:56‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 18‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ)‪ :(Black Adjust‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪/(Off‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )‪/(Low‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ )‪ /(Medium‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(High‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )‪ :(Dynamic Contrast‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪/(Off‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )‪/(Low‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ )‪/(Medium‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(High‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎ)‪+٣~-٣ :(Gamma‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﺃﻭ ◄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ : (Colour Space‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ /(Auto‬ﺃﺻﻠﻲ )‪/(Native‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪(Custom‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺗﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ :(Auto‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ )‪ :(Native‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪ :(Custom‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻴﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻪ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ )‪/(Red‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ )‪/(Green‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ )‪/(Blue‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ )‪/(Yellow‬ﺳﻤﺎﻭﻱ )‪/(Cyan‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ )‪(Magenta‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻴﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ (Colour Space‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪.(Custom‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ) ‪ (Red‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ )‪ (Green‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ )‪ (Blue‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻭﻱ )‪ (Cyan‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ )‪.(Magenta‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ )‪/(Red‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ )‪/(Green‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ )‪ :(Blue‬ﻓﻲ »ﻭﻥ )‪ ،(Colour‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ RGB‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﱠﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ) ‪ (Red‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ )‪ (Green‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ )‪ (Blue‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﺃﻭ ◄ ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )‪ :(Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ)‪ :(White Balance‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ)‪ / (R-Offset‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ)‪ / (G-Offset‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ)‪ / (B-Offset‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ)‪ / (R-Gain‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ)‪ / (G-Gain‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ)‪ / (B-Gain‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ)‪(Reset‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ)‪ / (R-Offset‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ)‪ / (G-Offset‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ)‪ / (B-Offset‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ)‪/ (R-Gain‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ)‪ / (G-Gain‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ)‪:(B-Gain‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﺃﻭ ◄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪ :(Reset‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ)‪Flesh Tone): -١٥~+١٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻧﻔﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﺃﻭ ◄ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ)‪ :(Edge Enhancement‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(Off/On‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٩ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:58‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 19‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(Picture‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ ،(Picture Options‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪ ،(PC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪Color‬‬
‫‪ (Tone‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ )‪ (Size‬ﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )‪Screen Burn‬‬
‫‪ (Protection‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪Picture‬‬
‫‪.(Options‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪16:9 :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ )‪/Size): ١٦:٩‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ )‪/(Wide Zoom‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ )‪/Zoom)/٤:٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ (Just Scan‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺪرﺟﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ :16:9 −‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪.16:9‬‬
‫‪16:9 :‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪NR‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ )‪ :(Wide Zoom‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.4:3‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪DNle‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﺃﻭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫‪ −‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ)‪ :(Zoom‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :4:3 −‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ‪.4:3‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ :(Just Scan‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ (HDMI (٧٢٠p/١٠٨٠i‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪.((١٠٨٠i‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ (Just Scan‬ﻓﻲ ‪ (HDMI (1080i‬ﺃﻭﻭﺿﻊ‪:‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﺃﻭ ◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺃﻭ ► ﺃﻭ ◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺃﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪4:3‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )‪ :(Reset‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﺃﻭ ◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫)‪ ،(Reset‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .(ENTER‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ “ﻣﺴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ” )‪ (Just Scan‬ﻟـ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻗﺘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪.AV‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ (١٠٨٠p) HDMI‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﻭ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻭ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻭ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ )‪ (١٠٨٠p‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻭ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ P.SIZE‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )‪ ( , ) (Double‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪ ،(PC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ 16:9‬ﻭ ‪ 4:3‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺪرﺟﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪NR‬‬
‫‪DNle‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ :(Colour Tone‬ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪/(Cool٢) ٢‬ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪/(Cool١) ١‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)‪/(Normal‬ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‪/(Warm١) ١‬ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‪(Warm٢) ٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )‪ (Dynamic‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫)‪ ،(Standard‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‪ (Warm1) 1‬ﻭﺩﺍﻓﺊ‪.(Warm2) 2‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50G‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ )‪(Zoom‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﱢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ )‪ (Zoom‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﺃﻭ ◄‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﺃﻭ ◄‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ٍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٠ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:35:59‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 20‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ :(Digital NR) NR‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪/(Off‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )‪/(Low‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ )‪/(Medium‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪/(High‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(Auto‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭ‬
‫ﻇﻼﻝ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :DNIe‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ)‪/(Off‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ )‪/(Demo‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪(On‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DNIe‬ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،DNIe‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ .DNIe‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DNIe‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ )‪ ،(Demo‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ DNIe‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺍً ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DNIeTM‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ‪ DNIeTM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﻲ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪.(PC‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DNIe‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )‪ (Dynamic‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ‪ :(HDMI Black Level) HDMI‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )‪/(Normal‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ )‪(Low‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﻟﺦ( ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪) RGB‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.(٢٣٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺒـ ‪ DMI‬ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪.(RGB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ :(Blue Only‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪(Off/On‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﺒﺮﺍء ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ .AV‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ )‪ (Blue Filter‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD‬‬
‫اﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ )‪ (Home Theaters‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺪﺣﺮﺝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻏﺎﻣﻖ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ (Blue Only Mode‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ” )‪ (Movie‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪.(Standard‬‬
‫)‪/(White‬‬
‫‪/(Pixel‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ )‪Shift‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺪﺣﺮﺝ )‪/(Scrolling‬ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ )‪(Side Gray‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )‪(Vertical Line‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ )‪ .(Horizontal Dot‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪2:‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪2‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ )‪ :(Pixel Shift‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ PDP‬ﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ )‪ (Pixel Shift‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ (On‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ −‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ )‪ (Horizontal Dot‬ﻭﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )‪ (Vertical Line‬ﻭﻭﻗﺖ )‪(Time‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ؛‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )‪/(TV‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪/S-Video/(AV‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻥ )‪HDMI/(Component‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ )‪(Horizontal Dot‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)‪(Vertical Line‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ )‪) (Time‬ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ “ﻣﺴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ” )‪.(Just Scan‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢١ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:04‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 21‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ )‪ :(White‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﻣﺘﺪﺣﺮﺝ )‪ :(Scrolling‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ PDP‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ )‪ :(Side Gray‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،4:3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﻣﻖ )‪ :(Dark‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٤:٣‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻏﺎﻣﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺗﺢ )‪ :(Light‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،٤:٣‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (White‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺪﺣﺮﺝ )‪ .(Scrolling‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﻴﻦ ﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺪﺣﺮﺝ )‪ (Scrolling‬ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٢ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:05‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 22‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(Picture‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ▲ ﺃﻭ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )‪ ,(Reset‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ )‪ (OK‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء )‪ (Cancel‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ )‪ ،(Sound‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ )‪ (Mode‬ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ )‪ (Equalizer‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ SRS TS XT‬ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (Auto Volume‬ﻭﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫)‪ (TV Speaker‬ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ)‪(Sound Select‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ)‪ :(Mode‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ)‪ /(Standard‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ)‪/(Music‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ )‪ /(Movie‬ﺧﻄﺎﺏ )‪/(Speech‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ)‪(Custom‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻚ ﻟﺒﺚ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ)‪ (Standard‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‪L‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )‪ (Music‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪10kHz 3kHz 1kHz 300Hz 100Hz Balance‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ )‪ (Movie‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻄﺎﺏ )‪ (Speech‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻐﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪ (Custom‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪.(Sound mode‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﺃﻭ ◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ )‪10kHz/3kHz/1kHz/300Hz/100Hz/Balance :(Equalizer‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪W‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪:R/L‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪.R/L‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Dual I-II‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ )‪:(10kHz/3kHz/1kHz/300Hz/100Hz‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ “ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ” ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪.(Custom‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٣ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:05‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 23‬‬
‫‪ :SRS TS XT‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(Off/On‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ TruSurround XT‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ‪ SRS‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻱ ‪ ٥٫١‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ TruSurround‬ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﻭﺭﺍﺋﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Symbol‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪ TruSurround XT‬ﻭ‪ SRS‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ .SRS Labs, Inc‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ TruSurround XT‬ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.SRS Labs, Inc‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.SRS TS XT‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﺃﻭ ◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ (Off‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪.(On‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ X‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Dual I-II‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ :(Auto Volume‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(Off/On‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺑﺚ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻠﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )‪ :(TV Speaker‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(Off/On‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ MUTE‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )‪ (TV Speaker‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪.(Off‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ “ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ” ﻋﻠﻰ “ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ”‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ “ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ” )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ “ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ”‬
‫)‪ ) ((PIP‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ “ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ”‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ)‪ :(Sound Select‬ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ )‪/(Main‬ﻓﺮﻋﻲ )‪(Sub‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ،PIP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ )‪.(PIP‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ )‪ :(Main‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﻓﺮﻋﻲ )‪ :(Sub‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٤ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:06‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 24‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ DUAL I-II‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Dual-I‬‬
‫“ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪ ”١-‬ﺃﻭ ‪“ Stereo‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ”‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Dual I-II‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﺃﻭ ◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫)‪(Stereo‬‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Dual I-II‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫ﺑﺚ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )‪) (Mono‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ NICAM +‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )‪(Mono‬‬
‫)‪) (Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪ NICAM‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫)‪(NICAM Stereo‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ )‪(Stereo‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )‪(Mono‬‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( )‪(Normal‬‬
‫‪NICAM DUAL-I/II‬‬
‫‪A2‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫)‪(Stereo‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪DUAL-1‬‬
‫ﺑﺚ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪DUAL-I/II‬‬
‫‪DUAL I‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ )‪(Stereo‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ )‪(Stereo‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ‪W‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)‪(Mono‬‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫)‪(Normal‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ‪-2‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )‪) (Mono‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪DUAL II‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )‪(Mono‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ(‬
‫)‪(Forced mono‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﺎءﺕ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )‪.(Mono‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )‪.(Mono‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺘﻲ “ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ” )‪ (Auto Volume‬ﻭ “ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ”‬
‫)‪) (Sound Select‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (PIP‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ “ﺻﻮﺕ” )‪ (Sound‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻚ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٥ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:07‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 25‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ ،(Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ )‪ ،(Time‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (Clock Set‬ﻭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ )‪ (Sleep Timer‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ (Timer1) 1‬ﻭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ (Timer2) 2‬ﻭﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪(Timer3) 3‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪W‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻦ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪PIP‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪−− : −− :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﻗﻒ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﻗﻒ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪3‬‬
‫‪W am‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪(Clock Set‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ INFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻬﺮ )‪ (Month‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )‪ (Day‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ )‪ (Year‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (Hour‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )‪ (Minute‬ﺃﻭ ‪.am/pm‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ )‪ (Month‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )‪ (Day‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ )‪ (Year‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ (Hour‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ )‪ (Minute‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪.(Clock‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ )‪(Sleep Timer‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻭ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ −‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪ (Off‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٥٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (١٨٠‬ﻟﻠﺒﻘﺎء ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ) ‪.(Sleep Timer‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ X‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪W‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Dual I-II‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ / (Timer1) 1‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ / (Timer2) 2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪(Timer3) 3‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪) Off/On‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪00 : 12‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮ ﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ :(On Time‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (hour‬ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )‪ (minute‬ﻭ ‪am/‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ pm‬ﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪) .(Off/On‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪.(On‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪ :(Off Time‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (hour‬ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )‪ (minute‬ﻭ ‪am/‬‬
‫‪ pm‬ﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪) .(Off/On‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪.(On‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪00 : 12‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪1‬‬
‫‪am‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪am‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪ :(Repeat‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )‪ ,(Once‬ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ )‪ ,(Everyday‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ )‪(Mon - Fri‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ‪ (Mon ~ Sat) , (Sat ~ Sun) ,‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ :(Volume‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪ : (Programme‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ (On‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٦ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:09‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 26‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ )‪ / (Language‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )‪/ (Light Effect‬ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ)‪/(Entertainment‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻦ )‪ / (Melody‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪/ (Energy Saving‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ ،(Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪W‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪PIP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ)‪(Language‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )‪ :(Light Effect‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪/(Off‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ)‪In‬‬
‫‪/(Standby‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ )‪/(In Watching TV‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪(Always‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻏﻠﻠﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪ :(Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ )‪ :(In Standby‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ )‪ :(In Watching TV‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ :(Always‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )‪ (Light Effect‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪ (Off‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ )‪ :(Melody‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪/(Off‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )‪/(Low‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ )‪/(Medium‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(High‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺤﻦ)‪(Melody‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.MUTE‬‬
‫)‪.(Volume‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ )‪.(Timer‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ)‪ :(Entertainment‬ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪/(Off‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ )‪/(Sports‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ )‪/(Cinema‬ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ )‪(Game‬‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪ :(Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ )‪ :(SPORTS‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ )‪ :(Cinema‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺤﺴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ّ‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ )‪ :(Game‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ )‪ (Entertainment‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ ،(On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ )‪.(Entertainment‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ )‪ (Entertainment‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪ :(Energy Saving‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪/(Off‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )‪/(Low‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ )‪/(Medium‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(High‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪ :(Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(Energy Saving‬‬‫ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )‪ :(Low‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ )‪ :(Medium‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ :(High‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(Energy Saving‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﺃﻭ ◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Dual I-II‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪W‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٧ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:11‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 27‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪(PIP‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ ،(Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،PIP‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪)PIP :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪/(Off‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ ((On‬ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ )‪ (Source‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫)‪ (Size‬ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ )‪ (Position‬ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪(Programme‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪W‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪PIP‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪PIP‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪TV :‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪P 1:‬‬
‫‪PIP‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪ :PIP‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(Off / On‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ PIP‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪AV2, AV1,TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪Component1, 2‬‬
‫‪HDMI1, 2‬‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ)‪AV2/AV1/TV :(Source‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ )‪:(Size‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪ (PC‬ﻭ ‪ ،Component‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ )‪ً (Size‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ )‪:(Position‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ “ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ” )‪ (Position‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ) ‪.( ,‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪(Programme‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ )‪ (Source‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) TV‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٨ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:12‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 28‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ,‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﻼ‪ ,‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ,‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪(.Samsung‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ “ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ” ﻓﻲ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪) Display Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ “ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ” )‪ ،(Settings tab‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ‪Display‬‬
‫‪) Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) Display Modes Table‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ )‪ .(Advanced‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ (Monitor‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)‪ (Screen refresh rate‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪Display‬‬
‫‪ .(Modes Table‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ )‪ (Vertical Frequency‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫)‪ (Horizontal Frequency‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺳﻌﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪.(Screen refresh rate‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ )‪ (OK‬ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ )‪ (OK‬ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ .(Display Properties‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٩ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:13‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 29‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺩﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻝﺍﺥﺩﺇ ‪D-Sub‬‬
‫ﻉﺽﻭﻝﺍ‬
‫ﺓﻕﺩﻝﺍ‬
‫ﻱﻕﻑﺃﻝﺍ ﺩﺩﺭﺕﻝﺍ‬
‫)ﺯﺕﺭﻩ ﻭﻝﻱﻙ(‬
‫ﻱﺱﺃﺭﻝﺍ ﺩﺩﺭﺕﻝﺍ‬
‫)ﺯﺕﺭﻩ(‬
‫ﻝﺍ ﺓﺭﻭﺩﻝﺍ ﺓﺏﺫﺏﺫ‬
‫ﻝﺍ ﻁﺍﻕﻥﻝ ﺓﻱﻥﻡﺯ‬
‫ﻝﺱﻙﺏ‬
‫)ﺯﺕﺭﻩ ﺍﺝﻱﻡ(‬
‫ﺏﺍﻁﻕﺃﻝﺍ‬
‫ﺓﻥﻡﺍﺯﺕﻡﻝﺍ‬
‫)ﻱﺱﺃﺭ‪/‬ﻱﻕﻑﺃ(‬
‫‪PS42A410‬‬
‫‪PS50A410‬‬
‫‪IBM‬‬
‫‪640 x 350‬‬
‫‪720 x 400‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪70.086‬‬
‫‪70.087‬‬
‫‪25.175‬‬
‫‪28.322‬‬
‫‪+/‬‬‫‪-/+‬‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫‪VESA‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪800 x 600‬‬
‫‪800 x 600‬‬
‫‪800 x 600‬‬
‫‪1024 x 768‬‬
‫‪1024 x 768‬‬
‫‪1024 x 768‬‬
‫‪1360 x 768‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪37.861‬‬
‫‪37.500‬‬
‫‪37.879‬‬
‫‪48.077‬‬
‫‪46.875‬‬
‫‪48.363‬‬
‫‪56.476‬‬
‫‪60.023‬‬
‫‪47.712‬‬
‫‪59.940‬‬
‫‪72.809‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪60.317‬‬
‫‪72.188‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪60.004‬‬
‫‪70.069‬‬
‫‪75.029‬‬
‫‪60.015‬‬
‫‪25.175‬‬
‫‪31.500‬‬
‫‪31.500‬‬
‫‪40.000‬‬
‫‪50.000‬‬
‫‪49.500‬‬
‫‪65.000‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪78.750‬‬
‫‪85.500‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫ﻝﺍﺥﺩﺇ ‪HDMI/DVI‬‬
‫ﻉﺽﻭﻝﺍ‬
‫ﺓﻕﺩﻝﺍ‬
‫ﻱﻕﻑﺃﻝﺍ ﺩﺩﺭﺕﻝﺍ‬
‫)ﺯﺕﺭﻩ ﻭﻝﻱﻙ(‬
‫ﻱﺱﺃﺭﻝﺍ ﺩﺩﺭﺕﻝﺍ‬
‫)ﺯﺕﺭﻩ(‬
‫ﻝﺍ ﺓﺭﻭﺩﻝﺍ ﺓﺏﺫﺏﺫ‬
‫ﻝﺍ ﻁﺍﻕﻥﻝ ﺓﻱﻥﻡﺯ‬
‫ﻝﺱﻙﺏ‬
‫)ﺯﺕﺭﻩ ﺍﺝﻱﻡ(‬
‫ﺏﺍﻁﻕﺃﻝﺍ‬
‫ﺓﻥﻡﺍﺯﺕﻡﻝﺍ‬
‫)ﻱﺱﺃﺭ‪/‬ﻱﻕﻑﺃ(‬
‫‪VESA‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪800 x 600‬‬
‫‪1024 x 768‬‬
‫‪1360 x 768‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪37.879‬‬
‫‪48.363‬‬
‫‪47.712‬‬
‫‪59.940‬‬
‫‪60.317‬‬
‫‪60.004‬‬
‫‪60.015‬‬
‫‪25.175‬‬
‫‪40.000‬‬
‫‪65.000‬‬
‫‪85.500‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪PS42A410‬‬
‫‪PS50A410‬‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫✔‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI IN ٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.HDMI/DVI‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪.SOG‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،PS٤٢A٤١٠‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ٧٦٨ ×١٠٢٤) VESA‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،PS٥٠A٤١٠‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ٨٧٦ × ١٣٦٠) VESA‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٠ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:13‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 30‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪(PC‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) PC‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.SOURCE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(Picture‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪،(Auto Adjustment‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ )‪ ،(Screen Adjustment‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪.(Reset‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(Auto Adjustment‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪،(Auto Adjustment‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ )‪ :(Screen Adjustment‬ﺧﺸﻦ )‪/(Coarse‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ )‪/(Fine‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ )‪/(Position‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(Image Reset‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ )ﺧﺸﻦ( ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺸﻦ )‪ (Coarse‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ )‪ ،(Fine‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ )‪(Position‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼءﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲‪.►/◄/▼/‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪PIP‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺧﺸﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(Image Reset‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪.‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣١ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:13‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 31‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪(Teletext‬‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ,‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺮﻭﺝ(‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ً‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ(‬
‫)ﺣﺠﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ )ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ )ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،FASTEXT‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻧﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺧﻠﻂ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪.(LIST/FLOF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،LIST‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) List save‬ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻓﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ )ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٢ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:15‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 32‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺴﺖ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻫـ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.FASTEXT‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(FASTEXT‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TV‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٣ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:18‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 33‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ) ‪( VESA‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ )‪VESA. (A * B‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫‪٢٦ ~ ٢٣‬‬
‫‪١٠٠ * ٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪M٤‬‬
‫‪٤٠ ~ ٣٢‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠ * ٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪M٦‬‬
‫‪٥٢ ~ ٤٦‬‬
‫‪LCD-TV‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ * ٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ * ٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪400 * 700‬‬
‫)‪(No VESA‬‬
‫‪٧٠ ~ ٥٧‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ * ٨٠٠‬‬
‫‪~ ٨٠‬‬
‫‪٨٠٠ * ١٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪٥٨ ~ ٤٢‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪PDP-TV‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ * ٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ * ٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪407 * 676‬‬
‫)‪(No VESA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪M٨‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪M٨‬‬
‫‪٧٠ ~ ٦٣‬‬
‫‪٤٠٠ * ٨٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪~ ٨٠‬‬
‫‪٨٠٠ * ١٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺭﻓﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪ ،VESA‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪.VESA‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ VESA‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﺈﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﺍﻥ ﺣﺠﻤﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ‪ ٥٧‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻭ ‪ ٦٣‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .VESA‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٤ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:19‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 34‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ )‪ 1P‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪)(1P‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪PIP‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫►‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ (Position1) ١‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ (Position2) ٢‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ (Position3) ٣‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫‪.‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،(Position١) ١‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪Current position saved as) ١‬‬
‫‪.(Position1‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫►‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.RETURN‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫►‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺃﻭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ►‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ “ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ”‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄ ﺃﻭ‬
‫► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ )‪ ،(Yes‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .ENTER‬ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺬ ﱡﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫►‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﺃﻭ ◄ ﺃﻭ ► ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫)‪ ،(Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ “ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ )‪Wall-Mount‬‬
‫‪ ،(Adjustment‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٥ -‬‬
‫‪2008-4-8 14:50:59‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 35‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺬﻛﺮﻩ‬
‫►‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‪1‬‬
‫►‬
‫►‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪Position)١‬‬
‫‪ (1‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ (Position 2) ٢‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪٣‬‬
‫)‪.(Position 3‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫►‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ “ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ” ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٤٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫)‪.(WMN٥٠٩٠A‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺼﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٦ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:23‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 36‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺤﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ,‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ (Power‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑـ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪ (Off/On‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )‪ (TV Speaker‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪.(On‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MUTE‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﻦ “‪ ”+‬ﻭ“–” ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ )‪) STB‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ( ﻭ‪) DVD‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ (DVD‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Source‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ)‪ (Just Scan‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ »ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ« )‪.(Resets all settings to the default values‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٧ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-18 14:36:25‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 37‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪PS42A410‬‬
‫‪PS50A410‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻗﻄﺮﻱ(‬
‫‪ ٤٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪Hz ٦٠ @ ٧٦٨ x ١٠٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻣﺨﺮﺝ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ‬
‫‪Hz ٦٠ @ ٧٦٨ x ١٣٦٠‬‬
‫‪W ١٠ + W ١٠‬‬
‫‪W ١٠ + W ١٠‬‬
‫) ‪(mm ٩٥٫٠ X ٦٩٩٫٤ X ١٠٥٤٫٩‬‬
‫) ‪(mm ٣١٥٫٩ X ٧٥٩٫٤ X ١٠٥٤٫٩‬‬
‫) ‪(mm ٩٥٫٠ X ٧٦٩٫٧ X ١٢٣٠٫٩‬‬
‫) ‪(mm ٣١٥٫٩ X ٨٢١٫٨ X ١٢٣٠٫٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪Kg ٢٧٫٨‬‬
‫‪Kg ٣١٫٥‬‬
‫‪Kg ٣٤٫٠‬‬
‫‪Kg ٣٧٫٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٤‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪١٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٪٨٠‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻜﺜﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠-‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤-‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١١٣‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٪٩٥‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻜﺜﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.B‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣٨ -‬‬
‫‪2008-3-31 17:41:38‬‬
‫‪BN68-01448C_Ara.indb 38‬‬
Download PDF